diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.aps b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a0f0e75636f --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +BootloaderCDC30-Sep-2008 14:20:0930-Sep-2008 14:20:30241030-Sep-2008 14:20:0944, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCBootloaderCDC.elfC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000BootloaderCDC.cDescriptors.cBootloaderCDC.hDescriptors.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111BootloaderCDC.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exeC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\BootloaderCDC.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\Descriptors.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\BootloaderCDC.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\Descriptors.c diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..654eabd22f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c @@ -0,0 +1,570 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the CDC class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C +#include "BootloaderCDC.h" + +/* Globals: */ +/** Line coding options for the virtual serial port. Although the virtual serial port data is never + * sent through a physical serial port, the line encoding data must still be read and preserved from + * the host, or the host will detect a problem and fail to open the port. This structure contains the + * current encoding options, including baud rate, character format, parity mode and total number of + * bits in each data chunk. + */ +CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { BaudRateBPS: 9600, + CharFormat: OneStopBit, + ParityType: Parity_None, + DataBits: 8 }; + +/** Current address counter. This stores the current address of the FLASH or EEPROM as set by the host, + * and is used when reading or writing to the AVRs memory (either FLASH or EEPROM depending on the issued + * command.) + */ +uint16_t CurrAddress; + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run + * via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application + * jumped to via an indirect jump to location 0x0000. + */ +bool RunBootloader = true; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously + * runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start + * the loaded application code. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + while (RunBootloader) + { + USB_USBTask(); + CDC_Task(); + } + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Wait until any pending transmissions have completed before shutting down */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + + /* Shut down the USB subsystem */ + USB_ShutDown(); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table back to the application section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = 0; + + /* Reset any used hardware ports back to their defaults */ + PORTD = 0; + DDRD = 0; + + #if defined(PORTE) + PORTE = 0; + DDRE = 0; + #endif + + /* Re-enable RWW section */ + boot_rww_enable(); + + /* Start the user application */ + AppPtr_t AppStartPtr = (AppPtr_t)0x0000; + AppStartPtr(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the bootloader should exit and the user + * application started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Upon disconnection, run user application */ + RunBootloader = false; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready + * to relay data to and from the attached USB host. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library, so that they can be handled appropriately + * for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding; + + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Process CDC specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof(LineCoding); i++) + Endpoint_Write_Byte(*(LineCodingData++)); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof(LineCoding); i++) + *(LineCodingData++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetControlLineState: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Reads or writes a block of EEPROM or FLASH memory to or from the appropriate CDC data endpoint, depending + * on the AVR910 protocol command issued. + * + * \param Command Single character AVR910 protocol command indicating what memory operation to perform + */ +static void ProgramReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command) +{ + uint16_t BlockSize; + char MemoryType; + + bool HighByte = false; + uint8_t LowByte = 0; + + BlockSize = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 8); + BlockSize |= FetchNextCommandByte(); + + MemoryType = FetchNextCommandByte(); + + if ((MemoryType == 'E') || (MemoryType == 'F')) + { + /* Check if command is to read memory */ + if (Command == 'g') + { + /* Re-enable RWW section */ + boot_rww_enable(); + + while (BlockSize--) + { + if (MemoryType == 'E') + { + /* Read the next EEPROM byte into the endpoint */ + WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)CurrAddress)); + + /* Increment the address counter after use */ + CurrAddress++; + } + else + { + /* Read the next FLASH byte from the current FLASH page */ + #if defined(RAMPZ) + WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte_far(((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1) + HighByte)); + #else + WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte((CurrAddress << 1) + HighByte)); + #endif + + /* If both bytes in current word have been read, increment the address counter */ + if (HighByte) + CurrAddress++; + + HighByte ^= 1; + } + } + } + else + { + uint32_t PageStartAddress = ((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1); + + if (MemoryType == 'F') + { + boot_page_erase(PageStartAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + + while (BlockSize--) + { + if (MemoryType == 'E') + { + /* Write the next EEPROM byte from the endpoint */ + eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)CurrAddress, FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Increment the address counter after use */ + CurrAddress++; + } + else + { + /* If both bytes in current word have been written, increment the address counter */ + if (HighByte) + { + /* Write the next FLASH word to the current FLASH page */ + boot_page_fill(((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1), ((FetchNextCommandByte() << 8) | LowByte)); + + HighByte = false; + + /* Increment the address counter after use */ + CurrAddress++; + } + else + { + LowByte = FetchNextCommandByte(); + + HighByte = true; + } + } + } + + /* If in FLASH programming mode, commit the page after writing */ + if (MemoryType == 'F') + { + /* Commit the flash page to memory */ + boot_page_write(PageStartAddress); + + /* Wait until write operation has completed */ + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + + /* Send response byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + } + else + { + /* Send error byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('?'); + } +} + +/** Retrieves the next byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint, and clears the endpoint bank if needed + * to allow reception of the next data packet from the host. + * + * \return Next received byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint + */ +static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void) +{ + /* Select the OUT endpoint so that the next data byte can be read */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + /* If OUT endpoint empty, clear it and wait for the next packet from the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + } + + /* Fetch the next byte from the OUT endpoint */ + return Endpoint_Read_Byte(); +} + +/** Writes the next response byte to the CDC data IN endpoint, and sends the endpoint back if needed to free up the + * bank when full ready for the next byte in the packet to the host. + * + * \param Response Next response byte to send to the host + */ +static void WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response) +{ + /* Select the IN endpoint so that the next data byte can be written */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* If OUT endpoint empty, clear it and wait for the next packet from the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + } + + /* Write the next byte to the OUT endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Response); +} + +/** Task to read in AVR910 commands from the CDC data OUT endpoint, process them, perform the required actions + * and send the appropriate response back to the host. + */ +TASK(CDC_Task) +{ + /* Select the OUT endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + /* Check if endpoint has a command in it sent from the host */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Read in the bootloader command (first byte sent from host) */ + uint8_t Command = FetchNextCommandByte(); + + if ((Command == 'L') || (Command == 'P') || (Command == 'T') || (Command == 'E')) + { + if (Command == 'E') + RunBootloader = false; + if (Command == 'T') + FetchNextCommandByte(); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == 't') + { + /* Return ATMEGA128 part code - this is only to allow AVRProg to use the bootloader */ + WriteNextResponseByte(0x44); + + WriteNextResponseByte(0x00); + } + else if (Command == 'a') + { + /* Indicate auto-address increment is supported */ + WriteNextResponseByte('Y'); + } + else if (Command == 'A') + { + /* Set the current address to that given by the host */ + CurrAddress = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 8); + CurrAddress |= FetchNextCommandByte(); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == 'p') + { + /* Indicate serial programmer back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('S'); + } + else if (Command == 'S') + { + /* Write the 7-byte software identifier to the endpoint */ + for (uint8_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < 7; CurrByte++) + WriteNextResponseByte(SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER[CurrByte]); + } + else if (Command == 'V') + { + WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR); + WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR); + } + else if (Command == 's') + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_signature_byte_get(4)); + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_signature_byte_get(2)); + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_signature_byte_get(0)); + } + else if (Command == 'b') + { + WriteNextResponseByte('Y'); + + /* Send block size to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE >> 8); + WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE & 0xFF); + } + else if (Command == 'e') + { + /* Clear the application section of flash */ + for (uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR; CurrFlashAddress++) + { + boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE; + } + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == 'l') + { + /* Set the lock bits to those given by the host */ + boot_lock_bits_set(FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == 'r') + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS)); + } + else if (Command == 'F') + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOW_FUSE_BITS)); + } + else if (Command == 'N') + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS)); + } + else if (Command == 'Q') + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_EXTENDED_FUSE_BITS)); + } + else if ((Command == 'C') || (Command == 'c')) + { + if (Command == 'c') + { + /* Increment the address if the second byte is being written */ + CurrAddress++; + } + + /* Write the high byte to the current flash page */ + boot_page_fill(((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1), FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == 'm') + { + /* Commit the flash page to memory */ + boot_page_write((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1); + + /* Wait until write operation has completed */ + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if ((Command == 'B') || (Command == 'g')) + { + /* Delegate the block write/read to a seperate function for clarity */ + ProgramReadWriteMemoryBlock(Command); + } + else if (Command == 'R') + { + #if defined(RAMPZ) + uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word_far(((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1)); + #else + uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word(CurrAddress << 1); + #endif + + WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord >> 8); + WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord & 0xFF); + } + else if (Command == 'D') + { + /* Read the byte from the endpoint and write it to the EEPROM */ + eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)CurrAddress, FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Increment the address after use */ + CurrAddress++; + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == 'd') + { + /* Read the EEPROM byte and write it to the endpoint */ + WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)CurrAddress)); + + /* Increment the address after use */ + CurrAddress++; + } + else if (Command == 27) + { + /* Escape is sync, ignore */ + } + else + { + /* Unknown command, return fail code */ + WriteNextResponseByte('?'); + } + + /* Select the IN endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Remember if the endpoint is completely full before clearing it */ + bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()); + + /* Send the endpoint data to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* If a full endpoint's worth of data was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to signal end of transfer */ + if (IsEndpointFull) + { + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Select the OUT endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + /* Acknowledge the command from the host */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } +} diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0d8f1e3d8df --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderCDC.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CDC_H_ +#define _CDC_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // USB Functionality + + /* Macros: */ + /** CDC Class Specific request to get the line encoding on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port, including the + * baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits. + */ + #define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21 + + /** CDC Class Specific request to set the line encoding on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port, including the + * baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits. + */ + #define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20 + + /** CDC Class Specific request to set the state of the serial handshake lines (such as DCD and RTS) on + * a CDC-ACM virtual serial port. + */ + #define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22 + + /** Version major of the CDC bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR 0x01 + + /** Version minor of the CDC bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR 0x00 + + /** Hardware version major of the CDC bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MAJOR 0x01 + + /** Hardware version minor of the CDC bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MINOR 0x00 + + /** Eight character bootloader firmware identifier reported to the host when requested */ + #define SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER "LUFA-CDC" + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a non-returning pointer to the start of the loaded application in flash memory. */ + typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN; + + /** Type define for the CDC-ACM virtual serial port line encoding options, including baud rate, format, parity + * and size of each data chunk in bits. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate in BPS */ + uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format, an entry from the BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum */ + uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity mode, an entry from the BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodeingParity_t enum */ + uint8_t DataBits; /**< Size of each data chunk, in bits */ + } CDC_Line_Coding_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible line encoding formats on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port */ + enum BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t + { + OneStopBit = 0, /**< Single stop bit */ + OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< 1.5 stop bits */ + TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Two stop bits */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible parity modes on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port */ + enum BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodeingParity_t + { + Parity_None = 0, /**< No data parity checking */ + Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd data parity checking */ + Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even data parity checking */ + Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark data parity checking */ + Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space data parity checking */ + }; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(CDC_Task); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static void ProgramReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command); + static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void); + static void WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cb6f9f01f17 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage CDC Class USB AVR Bootloader + * + * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a CDC Class device (virtual serial port), allowing for AVR109 + * protocol compatible programming software to load firmware onto the AVR. + * + * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB1287, and will fit into 4KB of bootloader space. If + * you wish to enlarge this space and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the BOOT_START and MCU + * values in the accompanying makefile. + * + * This bootloader is compatible with the open source application AVRDUDE, or Atmel's AVRPROG. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Communications Device Class (CDC)
USB Subclass:Abstract Control Model (ACM)
Relevant Standards:USBIF CDC Class Standard
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c b/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ee0e194d88b --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x204A, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + ProductStrIndex: 0x01, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC_Functional_IntHeader: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x10, 0x01} + }, + + CDC_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x03, 0x01} + }, + + CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x06} + }, + + CDC_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x00, 0x01} + }, + + ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(15), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"AVR CDC Bootloader" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + if (!(DescriptorNumber)) + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = LanguageString.Header.Size; + } + else + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = ProductString.Header.Size; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h b/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8bd6bdf8565 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Structure for a CDC class Functional descriptor, with a given data size. This is used instead of a + * type define so that the same macro can be used for functional descriptors of varying data lengths, + * while allowing the sizeof() operator to return correct results. + * + * \param DataSize Size of the functional descriptor's data payload, in bytes + */ + #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \ + struct \ + { \ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \ + uint8_t SubType; \ + uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \ + } + + /** Endpoint number for the CDC control interface event notification endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 3 + + /** Size of the CDC control interface notification endpoint bank, in bytes */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Endpoint number for the CDC data interface TX (data IN) endpoint */ + #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number for the CDC data interface RX (data OUT) endpoint */ + #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 2 + + /** Size of the CDC data interface TX and RX data endpoint banks, in bytes */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_IntHeader; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf b/Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5ba226d2f28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - CDC Class Bootloader" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf b/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6df089ab781 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +; Windows LUFA CDC Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%COMPANY% +LayoutFile=layout.inf +DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME% = ManufName + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[ManufName] +%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Windows 2000/XP Sections +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Modem3.nt] +CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg + +[USBModemCopyFileSection] +usbser.sys,,,0x20 + +[Modem3.nt.AddReg] +HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern +HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +[Modem3.nt.Services] +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService + +[DriverService] +DisplayName=%SERVICE% +ServiceType=1 +StartType=3 +ErrorControl=1 +ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Strings] +COMPANY="LUFA Library" +MFGNAME="Dean Camera" +Modem3="USB AVR109 Bootloader" +SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver" \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile b/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3fa8ad4ff60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,711 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = BootloaderCDC + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Starting byte address of the bootloader +BOOT_START = 0x1E000 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DSTATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" +CDEFS += -DUSE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL -DFIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8 -DUSE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions +CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-blocks +CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-blocks-and-partition +CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-functions +CFLAGS += -fno-toplevel-reorder +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START) +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.aps b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4d0f40b7bc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +BootloaderDFU30-Sep-2008 14:20:4730-Sep-2008 14:21:00241030-Sep-2008 14:20:4744, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\DFU\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31000BootloaderDFU.cDescriptors.cBootloaderDFU.hDescriptors.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111BootloaderDFU.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a997b207c93 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c @@ -0,0 +1,692 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the DFU class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic. + */ + +/** Configuration define. Define this token to true to case the bootloader to reject all memory commands + * until a memory erase has been performed. When used in conjunction with the lockbits of the AVR, this + * can protect the AVR's firmware from being dumped from a secured AVR. When false, memory operations are + * allowed at any time. + */ +#define SECURE_MODE false + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C +#include "BootloaderDFU.h" + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is currently running in secure mode, disallowing memory operations + * other than erase. This is initially set to the value set by SECURE_MODE, and cleared by the bootloader + * once a memory erase has completed. + */ +bool IsSecure = SECURE_MODE; + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run + * via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application + * jumped to via an indirect jump to location 0x0000 (or other location specified by the host). + */ +bool RunBootloader = true; + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is waiting to exit. When the host requests the bootloader to exit and + * jump to the application address it specifies, it sends two sequential commands which must be properly + * acknowedged. Upon reception of the first the RunBootloader flag is cleared and the WaitForExit flag is set, + * causing the bootloader to wait for the final exit command before shutting down. + */ +bool WaitForExit = false; + +/** Current DFU state machine state, one of the values in the DFU_State_t enum. */ +uint8_t DFU_State = dfuIDLE; + +/** Status code of the last executed DFU command. This is set to one of the values in the DFU_Status_t enum after + * each operation, and returned to the host when a Get Status DFU request is issued. + */ +uint8_t DFU_Status = OK; + +/** Data containing the DFU command sent from the host. */ +DFU_Command_t SentCommand; + +/** Response to the last issued Read Data DFU command. Unlike other DFU commands, the read command + * requires a single byte response from the bootloader containing the read data when the next DFU_UPLOAD command + * is issued by the host. + */ +uint8_t ResponseByte; + +/** Pointer to the start of the user application. By default this is 0x0000 (the reset vector), however the host + * may specify an alternate address when issuing the application soft-start command. + */ +AppPtr_t AppStartPtr = (AppPtr_t)0x0000; + +/** 64-bit flash page number. This is concatenated with the current 16-bit address on USB AVRs containing more than + * 64KB of flash memory. + */ +uint8_t Flash64KBPage = 0; + +/** Memory start address, indicating the current address in the memory being addressed (either FLASH or EEPROM + * depending on the issued command from the host). + */ +uint16_t StartAddr = 0x0000; + +/** Memory end address, indicating the end address to read to/write from in the memory being addressed (either FLASH + * of EEPROM depending on the issued command from the host). + */ +uint16_t EndAddr = 0x0000; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously + * runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start + * the loaded application code. + */ +int main (void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL); + + /* Initialize the USB subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Run the USB management task while the bootloader is supposed to be running */ + while (RunBootloader || WaitForExit) + USB_USBTask(); + + /* Shut down the USB subsystem */ + USB_ShutDown(); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table back to the application section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = 0; + + /* Reset any used hardware ports back to their defaults */ + PORTD = 0; + DDRD = 0; + + #if defined(PORTE) + PORTE = 0; + DDRE = 0; + #endif + + /* Start the user application */ + AppStartPtr(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the bootloader should exit and the user + * application started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Upon disconnection, run user application */ + RunBootloader = false; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the DFU commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Discard unused wIndex value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Discard unused wValue value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Get the size of the command and data from the wLength value */ + SentCommand.DataSize = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + switch (bRequest) + { + case DFU_DNLOAD: + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Check if bootloader is waiting to terminate */ + if (WaitForExit) + { + /* Bootloader is terminating - process last received command */ + ProcessBootloaderCommand(); + + /* Indicate that the last command has now been processed - free to exit bootloader */ + WaitForExit = false; + } + + /* If the request has a data stage, load it into the command struct */ + if (SentCommand.DataSize) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + /* First byte of the data stage is the DNLOAD request's command */ + SentCommand.Command = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* One byte of the data stage is the command, so subtract it from the total data bytes */ + SentCommand.DataSize--; + + /* Load in the rest of the data stage as command parameters */ + for (uint8_t DataByte = 0; (DataByte < sizeof(SentCommand.Data)) && + Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(); DataByte++) + { + SentCommand.Data[DataByte] = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + SentCommand.DataSize--; + } + + /* Process the command */ + ProcessBootloaderCommand(); + } + + /* Check if currently downloading firmware */ + if (DFU_State == dfuDNLOAD_IDLE) + { + if (!(SentCommand.DataSize)) + { + DFU_State = dfuIDLE; + } + else + { + /* Throw away the filler bytes before the start of the firmware */ + DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE); + + /* Throw away the page alignment filler bytes before the start of the firmware */ + DiscardFillerBytes(StartAddr % SPM_PAGESIZE); + + /* Calculate the number of bytes remaining to be written */ + uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1); + + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) // Write flash + { + /* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */ + uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1); + + union + { + uint16_t Words[2]; + uint32_t Long; + } CurrFlashAddress = {Words: {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}}; + + uint32_t CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long; + uint8_t WordsInFlashPage = 0; + + while (WordsRemaining--) + { + /* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + } + + /* Write the next word into the current flash page */ + boot_page_fill(CurrFlashAddress.Long, Endpoint_Read_Word_LE()); + + /* Adjust counters */ + WordsInFlashPage += 1; + CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2; + + /* See if an entire page has been written to the flash page buffer */ + if ((WordsInFlashPage == (SPM_PAGESIZE >> 1)) || !(WordsRemaining)) + { + /* Commit the flash page to memory */ + boot_page_write(CurrFlashPageStartAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Check if programming incomplete */ + if (WordsRemaining) + { + CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long; + WordsInFlashPage = 0; + + /* Erase next page's temp buffer */ + boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + } + } + + /* Once programming complete, start address equals the end address */ + StartAddr = EndAddr; + + /* Re-enable the RWW section of flash */ + boot_rww_enable(); + } + else // Write EEPROM + { + while (BytesRemaining--) + { + /* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + } + + /* Read the byte from the USB interface and write to to the EEPROM */ + eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr, Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + + /* Adjust counters */ + StartAddr++; + } + } + + /* Throw away the currently unused DFU file suffix */ + DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE); + } + } + + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Send ZLP to the host to acknowedge the request */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + break; + case DFU_UPLOAD: + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + if (DFU_State != dfuUPLOAD_IDLE) + { + if ((DFU_State == dfuERROR) && IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Blank Check + { + /* Blank checking is performed in the DFU_DNLOAD request - if we get here we've told the host + that the memory isn't blank, and the host is requesting the first non-blank address */ + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(StartAddr); + } + else + { + /* Idle state upload - send response to last issued command */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(ResponseByte); + } + } + else + { + /* Determine the number of bytes remaining in the current block */ + uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1); + + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) // Read FLASH + { + /* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */ + uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1); + + union + { + uint16_t Words[2]; + uint32_t Long; + } CurrFlashAddress = {Words: {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}}; + + while (WordsRemaining--) + { + /* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + } + + /* Read the flash word and send it via USB to the host */ + #if defined(RAMPZ) + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(pgm_read_word_far(CurrFlashAddress.Long)); + #else + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(pgm_read_word(CurrFlashAddress.Long)); + #endif + + /* Adjust counters */ + CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2; + } + + /* Once reading is complete, start address equals the end address */ + StartAddr = EndAddr; + } + else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02)) // Read EEPROM + { + while (BytesRemaining--) + { + /* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + } + + /* Read the EEPROM byte and send it via USB to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr)); + + /* Adjust counters */ + StartAddr++; + } + } + + /* Return to idle state */ + DFU_State = dfuIDLE; + } + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + /* Send ZLP to the host to acknowedge the request */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + break; + case DFU_GETSTATUS: + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write 8-bit status value */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_Status); + + /* Write 24-bit poll timeout value */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(0); + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(0); + + /* Write 8-bit state value */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_State); + + /* Write 8-bit state string ID number */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(0); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + break; + case DFU_CLRSTATUS: + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Reset the status value variable to the default OK status */ + DFU_Status = OK; + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + break; + case DFU_GETSTATE: + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current device state to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_State); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + break; + case DFU_ABORT: + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Reset the current state variable to the default idle state */ + DFU_State = dfuIDLE; + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + break; + } +} + +/** Routine to discard the specified number of bytes from the control endpoint stream. This is used to + * discard unused bytes in the stream from the host, including the memory program block suffix. + * + * \param NumberOfBytes Number of bytes to discard from the host from the control endpoint + */ +static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes) +{ + while (NumberOfBytes--) + { + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Wait until next data packet received */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + } + + Endpoint_Discard_Byte(); + } +} + +/** Routine to process an issued command from the host, via a DFU_DNLOAD request wrapper. This routine ensures + * that the command is allowed based on the current secure mode flag value, and passes the command off to the + * appropriate handler function. + */ +static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void) +{ + /* Check if device is in secure mode */ + if (IsSecure) + { + /* Don't process command unless it is a READ or chip erase command */ + if (!(((SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_WRITE) && + IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF)) || + (SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_READ))) + { + /* Set the state and status variables to indicate the error */ + DFU_State = dfuERROR; + DFU_Status = errWRITE; + + /* Stall command */ + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + + /* Don't process the command */ + return; + } + } + + /* Dispatch the required command processing routine based on the command type */ + switch (SentCommand.Command) + { + case COMMAND_PROG_START: + ProcessMemProgCommand(); + break; + case COMMAND_DISP_DATA: + ProcessMemReadCommand(); + break; + case COMMAND_WRITE: + ProcessWriteCommand(); + break; + case COMMAND_READ: + ProcessReadCommand(); + break; + case COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR: + if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03, 0x00)) // Set 64KB flash page command + Flash64KBPage = SentCommand.Data[2]; + + break; + } +} + +/** Routine to concatenate the given pair of 16-bit memory start and end addresses from the host, and store them + * in the StartAddr and EndAddr global variables. + */ +static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void) +{ + union + { + uint8_t Bytes[2]; + uint16_t Word; + } Address[2] = {{Bytes: {SentCommand.Data[2], SentCommand.Data[1]}}, + {Bytes: {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}}}; + + /* Load in the start and ending read addresses from the sent data packet */ + StartAddr = Address[0].Word; + EndAddr = Address[1].Word; +} + +/** Handler for a Memory Program command issued by the host. This routine handles the preperations needed + * to write subsequent data from the host into the specified memory. + */ +static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void) +{ + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) || // Write FLASH command + IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Write EEPROM command + { + /* Load in the start and ending read addresses */ + LoadStartEndAddresses(); + + /* If FLASH is being written to, we need to pre-erase the first page to write to */ + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) + { + union + { + uint16_t Words[2]; + uint32_t Long; + } CurrFlashAddress = {Words: {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}}; + + /* Erase the current page's temp buffer */ + boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + + /* Set the state so that the next DNLOAD requests reads in the firmware */ + DFU_State = dfuDNLOAD_IDLE; + } +} + +/** Handler for a Memory Read command issued by the host. This routine handles the preperations needed + * to read subsequent data from the specified memory out to the host, as well as implementing the memory + * blank check command. + */ +static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void) +{ + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) || // Read FLASH command + IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02)) // Read EEPROM command + { + /* Load in the start and ending read addresses */ + LoadStartEndAddresses(); + + /* Set the state so that the next UPLOAD requests read out the firmware */ + DFU_State = dfuUPLOAD_IDLE; + } + else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Blank check FLASH command + { + uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; + + while (CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR) + { + /* Check if the current byte is not blank */ + #if defined(RAMPZ) + if (pgm_read_byte_far(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF) + #else + if (pgm_read_byte(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF) + #endif + { + /* Save the location of the first non-blank byte for response back to the host */ + Flash64KBPage = (CurrFlashAddress >> 16); + StartAddr = CurrFlashAddress; + + /* Set state and status variables to the appropriate error values */ + DFU_State = dfuERROR; + DFU_Status = errCHECK_ERASED; + + break; + } + + CurrFlashAddress++; + } + } +} + +/** Handler for a Data Write command issued by the host. This routine handles non-programming commands such as + * bootloader exit (both via software jumps and hardware watchdog resets) and flash memory erasure. + */ +static void ProcessWriteCommand(void) +{ + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03)) // Start application + { + /* Indicate that the bootloader is terminating */ + WaitForExit = true; + + /* Check if empty request data array - an empty request after a filled request retains the + previous valid request data, but initializes the reset */ + if (!(SentCommand.DataSize)) + { + if (SentCommand.Data[1] == 0x00) // Start via watchdog + { + /* Start the watchdog to reset the AVR once the communications are finalized */ + wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS); + } + else // Start via jump + { + /* Load in the jump address into the application start address pointer */ + union + { + uint8_t Bytes[2]; + AppPtr_t FuncPtr; + } Address = {Bytes: {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}}; + + AppStartPtr = Address.FuncPtr; + + /* Set the flag to terminate the bootloader at next opportunity */ + RunBootloader = false; + } + } + } + else if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF)) // Erase flash + { + uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; + + /* Clear the application section of flash */ + while (CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR) + { + boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE; + } + + /* Re-enable the RWW section of flash as writing to the flash locks it out */ + boot_rww_enable(); + + /* Memory has been erased, reset the security bit so that programming/reading is allowed */ + IsSecure = false; + } +} + +/** Handler for a Data Read command issued by the host. This routine handles bootloader information retrieval + * commands such as device signature and bootloader version retrieval. + */ +static void ProcessReadCommand(void) +{ + const uint8_t BootloaderInfo[3] = {BOOTLOADER_VERSION, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2}; + const uint8_t SignatureInfo[3] = {SIGNATURE_BYTE_1, SIGNATURE_BYTE_2, SIGNATURE_BYTE_3}; + + uint8_t DataIndexToRead = SentCommand.Data[1]; + + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) // Read bootloader info + { + ResponseByte = BootloaderInfo[DataIndexToRead]; + } + else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Read signature byte + { + ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[DataIndexToRead - 0x30]; + } +} diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e5c680d219e --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h @@ -0,0 +1,199 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderDFU.c. + */ + +#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_H_ +#define _BOOTLOADER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // USB Functionality + + /* Macros: */ + /** Major bootloader version number. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR 2 + + /** Minor bootloader version number. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV 0 + + /** Complete bootloder version number expressed as a packed byte, constructed from the + * two individual bootloader version macros. + */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION ((BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR << 4) | BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV) + + /** First byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1 0xDC + + /** Second byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2 0xFB + + /** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given one-byte long command. + * + * \param dataarr Command byte array to check against + * \param cb1 First command byte to check + */ + #define IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1) (dataarr[0] == cb1) + + /** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given two-byte long command. + * + * \param dataarr Command byte array to check against + * \param cb1 First command byte to check + * \param cb2 Second command byte to check + */ + #define IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1, cb2) ((dataarr[0] == cb1) && (dataarr[1] == cb2)) + + /** Length of the DFU file suffix block, appended to the end of each complete memory write command. + * The DFU file suffix is currently unused (but is designed to give extra file information, such as + * a CRC of the complete firmware for error checking) and so is discarded. + */ + #define DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE 16 + + /** Length of the DFU file filler block, appended to the start of each complete memory write command. + * Filler bytes are added to the start of each complete memory write command, and must be discarded. + */ + #define DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE 26 + + /** DFU class command request to detatch from the host. */ + #define DFU_DETATCH 0x00 + + /** DFU class command request to send data from the host to the bootloader. */ + #define DFU_DNLOAD 0x01 + + /** DFU class command request to send data from the bootloader to the host. */ + #define DFU_UPLOAD 0x02 + + /** DFU class command request to get the current DFU status and state from the bootloader. */ + #define DFU_GETSTATUS 0x03 + + /** DFU class command request to reset the current DFU status and state variables to their defaults. */ + #define DFU_CLRSTATUS 0x04 + + /** DFU class command request to get the current DFU state of the bootloader. */ + #define DFU_GETSTATE 0x05 + + /** DFU class command request to abort the current multi-request transfer and return to the dfuIDLE state. */ + #define DFU_ABORT 0x06 + + /** DFU command to begin programming the device's memory. */ + #define COMMAND_PROG_START 0x01 + + /** DFU command to begin reading the device's memory. */ + #define COMMAND_DISP_DATA 0x03 + + /** DFU command to issue a write command. */ + #define COMMAND_WRITE 0x04 + + /** DFU command to issue a read command. */ + #define COMMAND_READ 0x05 + + /** DFU command to issue a memory base address change command, to set the current 64KB flash page + * that subsequent flash operations should use. */ + #define COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR 0x06 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a non-returning function pointer to the loaded application. */ + typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN; + + /** Type define for a strucuture containing a complete DFU command issued by the host. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Command; /**< Single byte command to perform, one of the COMMAND_* macro values */ + uint8_t Data[5]; /**< Command parameters */ + uint16_t DataSize; /**< Size of the command parameters */ + } DFU_Command_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** DFU bootloader states. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each state. */ + enum DFU_State_t + { + appIDLE = 0, + appDETACH = 1, + dfuIDLE = 2, + dfuDNLOAD_SYNC = 3, + dfuDNBUSY = 4, + dfuDNLOAD_IDLE = 5, + dfuMANIFEST_SYNC = 6, + dfuMANIFEST = 7, + dfuMANIFEST_WAIT_RESET = 8, + dfuUPLOAD_IDLE = 9, + dfuERROR = 10 + }; + + /** DFU command status error codes. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each error code. */ + enum DFU_Status_t + { + OK = 0, + errTARGET = 1, + errFILE = 2, + errWRITE = 3, + errERASE = 4, + errCHECK_ERASED = 5, + errPROG = 6, + errVERIFY = 7, + errADDRESS = 8, + errNOTDONE = 9, + errFIRMWARE = 10, + errVENDOR = 11, + errUSBR = 12, + errPOR = 13, + errUNKNOWN = 14, + errSTALLEDPKT = 15 + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C) + static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes); + static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void); + static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void); + static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void); + static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void); + static void ProcessWriteCommand(void); + static void ProcessReadCommand(void); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..091ce408399 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage DFU Class USB AVR Bootloader + * + * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a DFU Class device, allowing for DFU-compatible programming + * software to load firmware onto the AVR. + * + * This bootloader is compatible with Atmel's FLIP application. However, it requires the use of Atmel's + * DFU drivers. You will need to install Atmel's DFU drivers prior to using this bootloader. + * + * As an open-source option, this bootloader is also compatible with the Linux Atmel USB DFU Programmer + * software, available for download at http://sourceforge.net/projects/dfu-programmer/. + * + * If SECURE_MODE is defined as true, upon startup the bootloader will be locked, with only the chip erase + * function available (similar to Atmel's DFU bootloader). If SECURE_MODE is defined as false, all functions + * are usable on startup without the prerequisite firmware erase. + * + * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB1287, and should fit into 4KB of bootloader space. If + * you wish to enlarge this space and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the BOOT_START and MCU + * values in the accompanying makefile. + * + * NOTE: This device spoofs Atmel's DFU Bootloader USB VID and PID so that the Atmel DFU bootloader + * drivers included with FLIP will work. If you do not wish to use Atmel's ID codes, please + * manually change them in Descriptors.c and alter your driver's INF file accordingly. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Device Firmware Update Class (DFU)
USB Subclass:None
Relevant Standards:USBIF DFU Class Standard, Atmel USB Bootloader Datasheet
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c b/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3a1c69c7301 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: PRODUCT_ID_CODE, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + ProductStrIndex: 0x01, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + DFUInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0xFE, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x02, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DFUFunctional: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t), Type: DTYPE_DFUFunctional}, + + Attributes: (ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD | ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD), + + DetatchTimeout: 0x0000, + TransferSize: 0x0c00, + + DFUSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.01) + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"AVR DFU Bootloader" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + if (!(DescriptorNumber)) + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = LanguageString.Header.Size; + } + else + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = ProductString.Header.Size; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h b/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b6d1a2af3f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Descriptor type value for a DFU class functional descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_DFUFunctional 0x21 + + /** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device will detach and re-attach when a DFU_DETACH + * command is issued, rather than the host issing a USB Reset. + */ + #define ATTR_WILL_DETATCH (1 << 3) + + /** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can communicate during the manefestation phase + * (memory programming phase). + */ + #define ATTR_MANEFESTATION_TOLLERANT (1 << 2) + + /** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_UPLOAD requests to send data from + * the device to the host. + */ + #define ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD (1 << 1) + + /** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_DNLOAD requests to send data from + * the host to the device. + */ + #define ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD (1 << 0) + + #if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFB + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x97 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFB + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x97 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF9 + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x96 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF9 + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x96 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFA + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x94 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF7 + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x94 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFB + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x95 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x88 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF4 + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x95 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x87 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF3 + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x94 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x88 + #else + #error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader. + #endif + + #if !defined(PRODUCT_ID_CODE) + #error Current AVR model is not supported by this bootloader. + #endif + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a DFU class function descriptor. This descriptor gives DFU class information + * to the host when read, indicating the DFU device's capabilities. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Standard descriptor header structure */ + + uint8_t Attributes; /**< DFU device attributes, a mask comprising of the + * ATTR_* macros listed in this source file + */ + uint16_t DetatchTimeout; /**< Timeout in milliseconds between a USB_DETACH + * command being issued and the device detaching + * from the USB bus + */ + uint16_t TransferSize; /**< Maximum number of bytes the DFU device can accept + * from the host in a transaction + */ + uint16_t DFUSpecification; /**< BCD packed DFU specification number this DFU + * device complies with + */ + } USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DFUInterface; + USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t DFUFunctional; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf b/Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f78e5fdefa7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - DFU Class Bootloader" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile b/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5a8e4eeed09 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,714 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = BootloaderDFU + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Starting byte address of the bootloader +BOOT_START = 0x1E000 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DSTATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" +CDEFS += -DUSE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL -DFIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=32 -DUSE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION +CDEFS += -DNO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fdata-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions +CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-blocks +CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-blocks-and-partition +CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-functions +CFLAGS += -fno-toplevel-reorder +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START) +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen clean_doxygen diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..adfbe6c25a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,218 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t HIDReport[] = +{ + 0x06, 0x9c, 0xff, /* Usage Page (Vendor Defined) */ + 0x09, 0x19, /* Usage (Vendor Defined) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Vendor Defined) */ + 0x0a, 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage (Vendor Defined) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x95, 0x82, /* Report Count (130) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0xff, /* Logical Maximum (255) */ + 0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0xc0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x16C0, + ProductID: 0x0478, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0010, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + ProductStrIndex: 0x01, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + HIDDescriptor: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(HIDReport) + }, + + HIDEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | HID_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: HID_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x40 + }, +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(21), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"AVR Teensy Bootloader" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + if (!(DescriptorNumber)) + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = LanguageString.Header.Size; + } + else + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = ProductString.Header.Size; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.HIDDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(HIDReport); + Size = sizeof(HIDReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..24a0cdaa810 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t HIDDescriptor; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t HIDEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the HID data IN endpoint. */ + #define HID_EPNUM 1 + + /** Size in bytes of the HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define HID_EPSIZE 64 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0df2320ac2c --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Teensy HID Bootloader" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4f09ac50b7c --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the TeensyHID bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_TEENSYHID_C +#include "TeensyHID.h" + +/* Global Variables: */ +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run + * via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application + * started via a forced watchdog reset. + */ +bool RunBootloader = true; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously + * runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL); + + /* Initialize USB subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + while (RunBootloader) + USB_USBTask(); + + /* Shut down the USB interface, so that the host will register the disconnection */ + USB_ShutDown(); + + /* Wait 100ms to give the host time to register the disconnection */ + _delay_ms(100); + + /* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */ + wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS); + + for (;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready + * to relay data to and from the attached USB host. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup HID Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(HID_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_SetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Wait until the command (report) has been sent by the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + /* Read in the write destination address */ + uint16_t PageAddress = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* Check if the command is a program page command, or a start application command */ + if (PageAddress == TEENSY_STARTAPPLICATION) + { + RunBootloader = false; + } + else + { + /* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */ + boot_page_erase(PageAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Write each of the FLASH page's bytes in sequence */ + for (uint8_t PageByte = 0; PageByte < 128; PageByte += 2) + { + /* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + } + + /* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */ + boot_page_fill(PageAddress + PageByte, Endpoint_Read_Word_LE()); + } + + /* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */ + boot_page_write(PageAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Re-enable RWW section */ + boot_rww_enable(); + } + + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + /* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a53fca30f6d --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for TeensyHID.c. + */ + +#ifndef _TEENSYHID_H_ +#define _TEENSYHID_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // USB Functionality + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) + #error This bootloader is not compatible with the selected AVR model. + #endif + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + #define TEENSY_STARTAPPLICATION 0xFFFF + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + +#endif diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..973819cf87a --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Teensy HID Class USB AVR Bootloader + * + * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a HID Class device, allowing for Teensy compatible programming + * software to load firmware onto the AVR, such as the official software at http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/. + * + * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB162, and will fit into 2KB of bootloader space. + * + * This spoofs (with permission) the offical Teensy bootloader's VID and PID, so that the software remains + * compatible with no changes. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device Class (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Class StandardTeensy Programming Protocol Details
Usable Speeds:Low Speed ModeFull Speed Mode
+ */ diff --git a/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..92dd8b9b35c --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,711 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb162 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = TeensyHID + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Starting byte address of the bootloader +BOOT_START = 0xC000 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DSTATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" +CDEFS += -DUSE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL -DFIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8 -DUSE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION +CDEFS += -DNO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions +CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-blocks +CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-blocks-and-partition +CFLAGS += -fno-reorder-functions +CFLAGS += -fno-toplevel-reorder +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START) +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen diff --git a/Bootloaders/makefile b/Bootloaders/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..78af34d67b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Bootloaders/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.fourwalledcubicle.com +# + +# Makefile to build all the LUFA USB Bootloaders. Call with "make all" to +# rebuild all bootloaders. + +# Bootloaders are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any +# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled +# code. + +all: + make -C 'DFU/' clean + make -C 'DFU/' all + + make -C 'CDC/' clean + make -C 'CDC/' all + + make -C 'TeensyHID/' clean + make -C 'TeensyHID/' all + +%: + make -C 'DFU/' $@ + make -C 'CDC/' $@ + make -C 'TeensyHID/' $@